JP2020044093A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of eliminating monotonicity in amusement regarding a special state and enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player; special state control means capable of controlling to a special state as a state differing from the advantageous state; special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a game value is more easily granted by the special state than a non-special state; decision means capable of deciding whether control is performed to an advantageous state or control is performed to a special state; determination means capable of performing determination before decision by the decision means; and performance execution means capable of executing a first suggestive performance for suggesting continuation of a special state and a second suggestive performance for suggesting completion of the special state in a performance mode differing from the first suggestive performance on the basis of determination by the determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value is provided. (A so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control to a special state advantageous to a player different from the advantageous state, and to be able to control to a special state in which a gaming value is easily given by the special state compared to the non-special state. There is. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that even in the small hitting game state (special state), the opening mode is such that the player can obtain a payout although the number is smaller than the big hitting game state. It also describes that the control is performed in a state (special state) where small hits are more likely to occur than in a normal state.

JP 2015-156952 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, the amusement in the special state is monotonous, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the monotonousness of gaming properties related to a special state and improve the interest in games.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. State control means, special state control means that can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state), and a special state in which a game value is more likely to be given by the special state than in the non-special state (E.g., KT state) controllable special state control means, determination means (e.g., a part in which the CPU 103 executes steps 052IWS059A and 052IWS064A) capable of determining whether to control to an advantageous state or to control to a special state; Determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes step 072IWS045) which can be determined before the determination means determines, and determination ( For example, a first suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect) that suggests the continuation of the special state based on the pre-reading determination result) and an effect mode different from the first suggestion effect, and the end of the special state. And an effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect) that suggests that the first suggestion effect is executed more than when the second suggestion effect is executed. The rate at which the special state ends is low (for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, the small hit RUSH does not end in any case, but the small hit RUSH does not end. Is executed, a 2R normal big hit or a small hit occurs, and in the case of a 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH ends (see FIGS. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1), the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. The special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily executed and the special state is easily controlled to the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information. The means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect on condition that the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 072IWS105 to 072IWS106 and 072IWS116). ~ 072 IWS 127).
According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues is different from the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues ( For example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, it becomes 10R probability variable big hit or small hit, and in each case, the small hit RUSH is continued, but when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, 2R normal It becomes a big hit or a small hit, and in the case of the 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH is not continued (see FIG. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the number of presentation modes of the first suggestion effect and the number of presentation modes of the second suggestion effect are different from each other (for example, small A first continuation suggestion effect, a second continuation suggestion effect, and a third continuation suggestion effect are provided as the hit RUSH continuation suggestion effects, and the first termination suggestion effect and the second end suggestion effect are provided as small hit RUSH end suggestion effects having different production modes. An effect is provided (see FIGS. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the execution ratios of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are different from each other (for example, a ratio at which a 10R probability variable hit occurs (FIG. 9-5). (35% in the example shown in (B)) and the rate of occurrence of the 2R normal big hit (30% in the same example) are different, and the rate determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect at the time of 10R certain big hit (FIG. 9-47 (A) in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (A)) and the ratio (90% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (B)) that determines to execute the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect at the time of 2R normal big hit. What is different, the rate at which it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect at the time of a small hit (35% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (C)), and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is determined to be executed Percentage (in this example, 0%) and may also be in to) as implemented by different.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the effect execution means can execute, as the first suggestion effect, an effect indicating that the special state continues over a plurality of variable displays. (For example, a part where effect control CPU 120 executes step 072 IWS 115).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), the effect execution means may control the control to a specific type of advantageous state (for example, a 10R probability variation big hit) as a first suggestive effect. An effect that suggests over the variable display can be executed, and as a second suggestion effect, an effect that suggests being controlled to a special type of advantageous state (for example, 2R normal big hit) over a plurality of variable displays is executed. It may be possible.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), the specific type of the specific type is determined at a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect modes performs the first suggestion effect. It is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the rate of the 10R certainty variable hit is high in the order of the third continuation suggestion effect> the second continuation suggestion effect> the first continuation suggestion effect; see FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C)). A special type of advantageous state is controlled at a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of presentation modes produces the second suggestion presentation (for example, second termination suggestion presentation> first termination suggestion). The ratio of 2R ordinary big hits is higher in the order of the effects (see FIGS. 9-47 (B) and (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8), the effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect in a common mode for the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. (For example, after a hold display that is a target of the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is displayed in a common mode, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the variable display of the prefetch notice notification is executed or the push button 31B is operated) The timing may change to the display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, or the display mode may change to the display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect).
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), the gaming machine is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Possible setting means and setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect) for suggesting the setting may be provided.
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a special variable winning prize ball device in feature part 072IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 072IW. It is an explanatory view for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start winning determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during opening of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect process at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. It is a flow chart which shows suggestion production processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows a winning ball number display suggestion effect process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an award ball number display suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number emphasis production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the award ball number emphasis production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch notice setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an ending effect process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH completion suggestion production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation mode at the time of an over winning, the presentation effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the presentation mode of the number of prize balls display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation mode at the time of an over winning, the presentation effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the presentation mode of the number of prize balls display suggestion effect. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of a variable display when a small hit occurs in a variable display of another special symbol during execution of a variable display of one special symbol.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right of the game area. I have. The right-handed indicator 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-turn notification LED 37 for prompting a right-turn operation is provided. Note that the right-turned notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start port switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Have been. As described above, the row 19 of nails for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). Only when the player has operated the game ball, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning port.

  Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the gaming balls are configured to be able to win in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails. It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided. A mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and a row of nails 19 may also be provided so that a game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

  On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves a plate-shaped bottom member formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down in a front-rear direction to move back and forth. An open state (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the member, and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved rearward from the closed state where it is moved forward toward the rear, and opening control is performed to open the large winning opening which is a winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable prize ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and move the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, a special winning port or a second starting winning port located below the bottom member is opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won, and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (in both closed and closed states). To say). The special variable prize ball device 17 removes the bottom member in the small hitting game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state, which has been moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control for opening the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed. In addition, the variable winning prize ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward and from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed, Opening control for opening the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from upper left to lower right, so that the game balls dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the special variable prize ball device 7 can be placed on the variable prize ball device 6B without winning. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces for reducing the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from upper right to lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in a closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense because the game ball is configured to flow toward the 17th. It can be said that.

  A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the large winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the gaming ball into the special winning opening and obtain a prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the gaming ball wins in the special winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special prize port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game sphere to the special prize port and obtain the prize ball, so that the player cannot obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  In the second start winning opening, a second starting switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by performing a firing operation (a so-called right-hit operation). )I do.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the normal symbols is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and thus the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided around the gaming area. .

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (a so-called left-handing operation) aiming at the left of the game area. When a player performs a left-hand operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game ball enters a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol display is performed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special figure game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on a big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”. . If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

  After the display result in the first special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (a normal state, a probable change state (high probability state), a KT state, a high base state, etc.) are prepared. The big hit type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  After the big hitting game state ends, the state may be controlled to a certain change state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  In the KT state, KT control is performed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, a control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure change time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is executed (hour saving state), and the general figure game is described as "per-figure hit". For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, a control (high opening control, high base control) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and thus is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a frequency cut (such as a frequency cut probability change).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the certain state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (right-hand operation) aiming to the right of the game area. When the player performs a right-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol display device 20 starts the ordinary figure game. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”, If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the second special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special map game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 is performed. It may be performed by, for example, turning on / off the light, or operating the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37. The LED is supplied to the substrate 13, and an LED signal (a signal for designating the ON / OFF state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The LED control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right strike notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on / off of the LED.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal, LED signal, and the like), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, so that the execution of the first special symbol game and management of suspension are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, execution of the second special symbol game, management of suspension, and the like are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

  Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process at each timer interrupt, control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like are realized (details will be described later).

  Subsequent to the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the game machine to be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to also output a test signal (right-handed test signal) capable of specifying a period during which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right strike test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is determined based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In the first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are determined by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. A process for determining one of them is included. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The first special symbol change process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and a measurement of an elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

  In the present example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first special symbol is changed. When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the small special fluctuating display may be controlled to be a small hitting game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special map process flag is before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is being performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. In addition, not limited to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the change display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

  Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol are changed. If the difference is large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stoppage of the swinging of the decorative design, and the effect gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the normal state.

  Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. May be configured. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and an effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, whereas in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds.

  Furthermore, the length of the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the game state, as in the small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In the first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. The processing for setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", a setting process for starting a big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, a process for starting a small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

  The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as the hold information.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process to change the change of the second special symbol. During display, a small hit may occur in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being performed (specifically, the value of the first special map process flag is set before the small hit is released). It is determined whether the value is equivalent to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being played. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. In addition, not limited to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the change display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the second special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

  Note that the small hit control based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol may be configured so that the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period varies depending on the game state.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, the processing for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

  The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. The processing during opening of the big hit is performed based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the measured elapsed time. The processing includes determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". Then, the processing during opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”. The value of the flag is updated to “5”. When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “7”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a driving of the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 7 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 072IW)
Next, the characteristic part 072IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 072IW will be described. First, the game state in the present feature part 072IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the characteristic part 072IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). Control, low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  In the first KT state of the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

  The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of ordinary drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is increased (but will be described later). For this reason, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state in the normal state is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  Further, the characteristic portion 072IW is configured such that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the characteristic part 072IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be opened based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the present feature part 072IW. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down. By moving the bottom member 052 IW 108 backward toward the rear from the closed state moved forward, the large winning opening serving as a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

  In the characteristic portion 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9A, the game ball that has won the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance route 052IW100 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance route 052IW100 is further branched into two routes 052IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guidance route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left side route 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right side route 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

  As shown in FIG. 9-1, a V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left-side route 052IW102, and when the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in an open state, a game guided to the guidance route 052IW100. The ball can enter the left route 052IW102 and can enter the V region 052IW104. When the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 052IW100 enters the right route 052IW103, and is discharged from the discharge region 052IW105 to the back side of the game region.

  The V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109.

  In addition, in the present feature part 072IW, when the big hit game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, after the big hit game ends. It is controlled to a probable change state.

  Note that the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error is determined and an error is notified. In this case, it takes some time before the specially-selected prize-ball apparatus 7 reaches the V region 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 immediately before the special-variable prize-ball apparatus 7 enters the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after this time, it may be configured to determine that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 9B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the feature part 072IW. In the characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9B, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), a count switch (first count switch). 23 and the detection signals from the V-area switch 052IW106 and the ejection-area switch 052IW107 in addition to the detection signals from the second count switch 24)), and transmit them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the characteristic part 072IW, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the door for the special winning opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83, the signal is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 9C and FIG. 9D are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 9C shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 9D shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9D, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six stages, and may be configured so that the setting can be changed in two to five stages, or the configuration can be changed in seven or more stages.

  First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9C. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probable change state (low probability state), the case of the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability of “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as large as the probability change state (high probability state) compared to the non-probability change state (low probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability State) or the probable change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. Thus, even in a case where the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the change display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times higher in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability State) or the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-3), the small hit is achieved. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the second special symbol change display is the small hit when performing the first special symbol change display). More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Thus, even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability becomes constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9D, the judgment values corresponding to the outliers are included in the judgment values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). As shown in FIG. 3C and FIG. 9D, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs according to the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, according to any of the set values “1” to “6”). , The outlier probability is different).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present example, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the outlier probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outlier). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (highest probability of big hit), the outlier probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outlier may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured so that, for example, the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, the determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9C), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

  In FIGS. 9-3 (A) and 9 (B) and FIGS. 9-4 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probable state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of a miss is different, the probability of a large hit in the probable state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability state (low-probability state). It may be reduced and the outlier probabilities may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values, for example, “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six possible setting stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table is configured such that, when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit is “2R normal big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “ This is a table that is referred to for determining one of “6R normal big hit”, “6R certain variable big hit”, and “10R certain variable big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the characteristic part 072IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as "10R probability variable jackpot" with a probability of 9%, determined as "6R probability variable jackpot" with a probability of 56%, and determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in the feature part 072IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Is determined as “10R probability variable hit” with a probability of 35%, determined as “6R probability variable hit” with a probability of 30%, determined as “2R probability variable hit” with a probability of 30%, and determined as “2R probability variable hit” with a probability of 5% 2R normal big hit ".

  The “10R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to a 16-bit big hit gaming state, and is shifted to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “6R probability change big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 6 rounds and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, when the “10R probability change big hit”, “6R probability change big hit”, and “6R normal big hit”, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game. Until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, the large winning opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won every round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings in the large winning opening that can be won in each round is about two to three.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 072IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, and the non-KT state according to the gaming state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The manner of transition of the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIGS. 9-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is “small hit A”, “small hit B” based on the random number for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. ”Or“ small hit C ”.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the characteristic part 072IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “small hit A” with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in the characteristic part 072IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “small hit B” with a probability of 70% and “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

  In this example, as described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 second during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-12), and the small hit game is performed. It is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. In the case of the "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 9-13), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 9-14), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-7 to FIG. 9-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol used in the characteristic portion 072IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 is the data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first non-KT special symbol shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the first variable patterns # 01 to # 06 is determined.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) is shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the non-KT second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-8 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

  In the characteristic portion 072IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when a change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely increased and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 072IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute). Is higher than the normal state.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is obtained even if a big hit occurs. Is relatively long, such as 5 minutes, to prevent an act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first reserved memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the low probability / first KT state is set, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The change pattern table is selected in accordance with the number of times of change after the change. In this case, if the first variation display is performed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9D, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is the first variation, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. If the first change of the low probability / first KT state is determined to be a small hit, the second change pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening) which is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic part 072IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 072IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize winning ball device 17 are changed before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

  In addition, in the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th variation shown in E) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 are displayed. Determined to be one. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9E, when it is determined to be out of the low probability / first KT state as the 2nd to 49th variation, the second variation pattern of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or a second variation pattern # 08 of a shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second in some cases. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. When the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 10 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds, and the change time is even shorter as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 08 and # 11 are where one or more second hold storages are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. When it is determined to be a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which has triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended, the fluctuation display of the 50th change (that is, the final change in the low probability / first KT state) is executed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and for the 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-8 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9F, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 14 to # 16 is performed. Is determined.

  In the characteristic portion 072IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), when it is determined to be a loss or a small hit as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. Is determined as the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by an end display for performing As shown in FIG. 9F, when it is determined that the jackpot is the 50th change in the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined resurrection display is determined.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, when a large hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits. Therefore, in the characteristic part 072IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit change of the first special symbol to a short change time, it is possible to shift to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before the forced loss frequently occurs. It is configured.

  In addition, unlike the feature part 072IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly released (for example, the first special symbol is changed). When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. In the case of the gaming machine, the change time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the change time of the big hit is set to the same short change time as the loss, the player will You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

  When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the high probability / first KT state is set, the fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (G), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 17 to # 21 is performed. Is determined.

  In addition, similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (G), even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. In addition, even when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the change pattern (second change pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small fluctuation is the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9G, when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, if the variation display after the second variation is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit which has triggered the high probability / first KT state, the variation display shown in FIG. 9-9 (H) is performed. The probability / first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation of the high probability / first KT state or later, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. Is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 9H, similarly to the low-probability / first KT state at the 2nd to 49th fluctuation, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern # 22 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of position after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. When it is determined to be a small hit as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 25 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds or the further shortened change time of 1 second. The second variation pattern # 26 of the variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the second or later variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 23 and # 26 are one or more second hold storages. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. If it is determined to be a big hit after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the state is the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. The selected variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 29 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. Or the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 of the normal variation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 33 of the variation may be determined. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

  More specifically, when the change pattern is determined, it is determined according to which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the variable display is to be performed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining variation patterns, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 9-10 is a diagram for determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for high probability / second special symbol for the second KT shown in FIG. 9-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-10, in the feature part 072 IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display that causes a small hit is performed, , Irrespective of any of the set values “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening fluctuation is selected.

  9-10 shows a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state, as an example. FIG. 9-7 to FIG. 9-9. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of the second KT state with a high probability. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, referring to FIG. 9-11 (1), a special variable prize ball in the case of being controlled to a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “probability variable jackpot”) The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  In addition, in the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and The region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V region 052IW104. When a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), a special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

  When a game ball enters the V-region 052IW104 and is detected by the V-region switch 052IW106 within a predetermined validity period, the game state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is turned on. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

  Next, using FIG. 9-11 (2), opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 in the case of being controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  In addition, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), when the first game ball winning the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and The area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in an open state for an extremely short period (in this example, 0.02 seconds). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes has been detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection validity period is after a very short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101. This is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection validity period, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V region 052 IW 104 substantially during a predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in a positively changed state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 9-12 to 9-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the KT state. 9-12 show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. FIG. 9-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. 9-14 show the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit C. FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 9-12 (2). 9 to 14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 The symbol change display is executed, and if it is determined to be a regular symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. If it is determined to be lost, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Is done. In this characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the elapse of the pre-processing time of 0.1 second, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit symbol is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-12 (1). In the case of the small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hitting A, Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) to 9-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 6B can be opened. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time 0.2 seconds of the next ordinary symbol, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, in the characteristic part 072IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 second is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

  In the characteristic portion 072IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the symbols are not changed is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2). As shown in FIG. 9-12 (2) to FIG. 9-14 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, a normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The symbol change display is executed, and if it is determined to be a regular symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. If it is determined to be lost, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Is done. In the characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After a lapse of the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-12 (2). In the case of the small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-13 (2), and in the case of the small hit C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special prize opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic portion 072IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0) is set as an interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened. .2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process). Accordingly, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball can easily enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball can easily win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning prize ball device 17 opens only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so that even in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in a special winning opening, and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called “small hit RUSH”. Is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C has been described. It is not limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened during the small hit game. The special variable prize ball device 17 may be opened two to eleven times. Also, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable prize ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable prize ball device 17 (special prize opening) is executed. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are the three types of the small hits A to C has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more small hit types are provided. Is also good.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 072IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to arriving at the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state is longer. Normally, the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state because the game ball is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the variable prize ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, the processing of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (See step S26). In addition, in the ordinary symbol process process of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is the probable change state (high probability state), and determines whether the game state is the non-KT state, the first KT state, or the second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not to make a regular hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In this characteristic part 072IW, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same as the second symbol. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable prize ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 second in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the fluctuating time or the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Thus, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

  In the characteristic unit 072IW, as described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. As shown in 9-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened. The time is controlled to be shorter.

  For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 9-12 (1) to FIG. 9- The variable prize ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 14 (1) is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) for long-time opening, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 9-12 (2) to 9-14. The variable winning prize ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled in a second opening pattern (short opening) in which it is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Further, even in the first KT state, when the low probability / last change display in the first KT state is performed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in accordance with the 49th special symbol change stop in the 50 special symbol reduced change periods in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is long opened when performing left-hit notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable prize ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and varying the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, a special symbol and a flag for shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the opening probability of the variable winning sphere device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning prize ball device 6B from winning a prize, and to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 to 9-14, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the movement of the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the change. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 072IW, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B before the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 is shortened by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set to be started, so that in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a firing operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 9-15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of special symbols. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a pattern fluctuation pattern. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outstroke designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variation big hit. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variation big hit. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specifying command (2R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal big hit. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the characteristic part 072IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command. Since the display result specifying command for the first special symbol can be determined to be the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command, the display result specifying command for the second special symbol can be determined. Although the designation command can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  Also, instead of transmitting the display result designation command, the game control microcomputer 100 responds to each of the 10R probability change big hit / 6R probability change big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R certain change big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been completed. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been started.

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending specifying command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) for specifying a display after the round during the big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first number of retained memories has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start winning designation command and the second effective start winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a start winning.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation command) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol for designating the result of the determination of the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type or the small hit type in the winning determination result. Command). The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result) indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern) as to which of the determination value ranges of the random number for variation pattern determination among the prize-winning determination results. Category command).

  The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that designates the first customer waiting state (a state in which the first special symbol has not been changed and the first hold storage has not been stored). Wait demo display designation command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that designates a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol has not been changed and the second hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for specifying the currently set value. The set value is set to “XX”. For example, when the set value is set to “1”, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. For example, when the setting value is set to “6”, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

  When the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the drawing is executed. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-15, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9 to 15 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command relating to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(First start winning determination process)
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the first start winning determination process (step S101A) in the first special symbol process process.

  In the first start winning determination processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved storage). It is checked whether the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the number is 4) (step 072IWS041). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the first start winning determination processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 072 IWS042), and also sets the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step 072 IWS043). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 104 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (step 072IWS044). In the process of step 072 IWS044, a random number for determining a hit, which is a software random number, a random number for determining a hit type, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and the like are extracted and stored in a storage area provided in the RAM 102 as pending information. You. In addition, instead of extracting random numbers for determining a change pattern in the first start winning determination process (at the time of start winning) and storing the random numbers in the storage area in advance, the random numbers may be extracted at the start of the change of the first special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a random number counter for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in a first variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-time determination process (step 072IWS045), and performs control for transmitting a symbol designation command and a fluctuation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize-time determination process (step 072IWS046). , 072IWS047). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type or the small hit type is determined. Separately, by executing a prize-winning determination process at the timing when the game ball starts to win the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening and before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning start is started. It is determined whether a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, a small hit type, a variation category, a variation pattern, and the like are determined. By doing so, it is possible to predict the display result before the effect symbol change display is executed, and to execute the prefetch notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result at the time of winning. In the prize-winning determination process, the determination of the start prize may be made for both the big hit and the small hit, or the determination of the start prize may be made only for the big hit.

  In the prize-winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 103 compares the random number for hit determination with the normal big hit determination value and small hit determination value, and confirms whether or not they match. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the random number for hit determination with the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of the probability change, and confirms whether or not they match. . Further, for example, when the random number for hit determination matches the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 determines which big hit type matches based on the hit type determination, and If the hit determination value matches, it is determined which small hit type matches based on the hit type determination. Note that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the variable display state is established in the step 072IWS045 at the time of the start winning prize to the actual start of the variable display based on the start prize. There is. Therefore, the game state has been changed before the fluctuation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, if a certain change big hit occurs before the start of the change, the game state changes from the normal state to the certain change state). Yes.) Therefore, the game state at the time of the start winning and the game state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination of a start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 072IWS048).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps 072IWS046 to 072IWS048, when a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening and the winning determination process is executed, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, A set of three commands of the first valid start winning designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is not (Step 052 IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052 IWS 52A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 052 IWS 53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052 IWS 54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always equal to the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are determined. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS55A. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

  The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to the timing shown in the present example. Or it may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variable flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability / first KT state is determined. The high-accuracy / first KT background designation command is determined, and the high-accuracy / second KT background designation command is determined when the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off, and the high probability / second KT state is determined. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, if the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing of step 052IWS58A and thereafter. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 052 IWS 57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a hit determination random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052 IWS 59A, so that at the time of starting prize. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained, the hit may be forcibly set to be off.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57A, the process of steps 052IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and the random number value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the big hit judgment module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is to be made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is 10R certain variable big hit, 6R certain big hit or 6R normal big hit based on the random number for hit type determination (step 052IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

  If it is determined in step 052IWS60A that the big hit has not occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 052). Step 052 IWS 66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 9-6 (A)). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS 69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (Step 052IWS69A). If the value is “0”, Step 052IWS75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether it has become “0” (step 052 IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 052 IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 052 IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the change (step 052IWS74A). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS75A.

  In the feature part 072IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability is set at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, Y is determined in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is determined in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052 IWS 73 A and S 73 B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

  Note that the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is to continue the right-handed notification and to continue the right-handed state. This is a flag for setting the state as the state and the effect background common to the first KT state.

  In this example, by executing the process of step 052 IWS 74 A and the process of step 052 IWS 74 B described later, the high base state is obtained by starting the variation display of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation reduction state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, is the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (the 50th variation display in this example) terminated? Or, in response to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortened state ends. It is desirable.

  Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped immediately before step 052 IWS75A are determined.

  In addition, in step 052 IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. (Step 052 IWS1700A). In this example, the special figure time reduction flag is set and the special symbol change display is shortened, so that it is more advantageous to execute the change display of the second special symbol (FIG. 9-7). 9), the small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-operation data shown in FIG. 9A as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052 IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the KT shown in FIG. 9B as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 052 IWS1702A).

  Next, the microcomputer 100 for game control, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052 IWS 1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-7 is used (step 052 IWS1703A). In this example, the change time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the change pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

  Further, when the variation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052 IWS 1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. Is started (step 052IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change process)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if not yet transmitted, and determines whether the big hit type Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to effect control CPU 120. Then, control for transmission is performed (step 052 IWS 1121A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (Step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (Step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (Step 052IWS1123A). Step 052 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated.

  If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the changing display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). . Note that whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit type is the 10R certain big hit or the 6R certain big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Note that whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 6R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the jackpot stored in step 052 IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit, the process is terminated.

  This is the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A) or the case where the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A). In a case where the display of the first special symbol is not being executed (ie, the 6R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in Step 052IWS1127A, N in Step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first forced symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmitting the finalization designation command is performed (step 052 IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

  By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in the characteristic part 072IW, the variation display of the second special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 052 IWS1129A. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. If the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 052 IWS1128A). In this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-small opening processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, N is determined in step 052IWS1120A, and the processing in steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Is interrupted and the first special symbol change display is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

  Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit. Even in the case where there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 052 IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the first fluctuation is also displayed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-hand display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and also performs control to transmit a right-hand lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the right-hand operation is performed. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state. However, the processing of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed to display the 50th variation display. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been transmitted in step 052 IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation, the first special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (Step 052IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag indicating that a big hit is started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 052IWS2017A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018A) and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2027A.

  By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in the present example, the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In the present example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41. The lighting of the display 26 may be started.

  If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052 IWS 2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052 IWS 2020A). If the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052 IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 052IWS2026A). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2027A.

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game. However, as described above, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. Therefore, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

  In the present example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. May be.

  In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed. (In this case, since the game is in the gate passage waiting state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not immediately started even if a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, and the first holding symbol is stored). May be configured.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output of a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a sound output of a large volume, Left-handed notification may be performed by a large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above-described configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is made in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. Alternatively, for a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, the left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt a player who intentionally performs a right-handing operation to return to a left-handing operation from a store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, the pass gate 41 makes a left-handed notification when a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are detected within a predetermined period (for example, one minute), and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening have a predetermined number. A left-handed notification may be made when a certain number (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart illustrating the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is not (Step 052 IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second reserved storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

  If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 052IWS53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052 IWS54B). That is, in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS55B, but the setting change processing (processing of changing the setting value) when the power is turned on. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific manner of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 052 IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, if the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 052IWS69B without performing the process of step 052IWS58B and thereafter. With this, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a hit determination random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B, so that at the time of the starting prize, May be forcibly determined to be a loss regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been obtained.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 052IWS57B, the process of steps 052IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit judgment random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B), and executes the big hit judgment module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for judging the hit type, it is determined whether the big hit type is 10R positive hit, 6R positive hit, 2R positive hit, or 2R normal hit (step 052IWS62B), and the hit type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), And proceed to step 052 IWS 69B.

  If it is determined in step 052IWS60B that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052 IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 052IWS67B) and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In addition, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 9-6 (B)). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS 69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is “0” (step 052IWS69B), and if it is “0”, proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether it has become “0” (step 052 IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 052 IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 052 IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS75B.

  Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052 IWS75B is determined.

  In addition, in step 052 IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIGS. 9-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 18, if “first” is replaced with “second”, the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting processing, the CPU 103 first performs the same processing as in step 052 IWS 1700A, and checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set or not, and As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 9-8 (D) to 9-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probable variable flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9E is selected. If it is the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probable change flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first change is the second special symbol change shown in FIG. The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change process)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if not yet transmitted, One of the display result specifying commands (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command, display result 3 specifying command, display result 5 specifying command, display result 6 specifying command, display result 7 specifying command) based on the determination result Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052 IWS1121B).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123B). Step 052 IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

  If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated.

  If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a large hit (step 052IWS1127B). . Note that whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process ends.

  If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain big hit, a 6R certain big hit, or a 2R certain big hit (step 052IWS1128B). . Whether it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the jackpot stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  This is the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B) or the case where the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B). In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol that does not become any of the 2R probability variable jackpots (that is, becomes the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 sets the effect control CPU 120 Control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol determination designation command (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

  By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the change display of the second special symbol which is the normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) is being executed, the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decorative symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is a large hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Alternatively, if the change display of the second special symbol that is the 2R probability change big hit is being executed, the second special symbol change process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 052IWS1128B). Based on the fact that the symbol change display is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, N is determined in step 052IWS1120B and the processing in steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the update of the second variable time timer in step 052IWS1122B is not performed. Therefore, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the change display of the second special symbol that is a certain change big hit is being executed, the second change time timer is set during the small hit game. Update is interrupted, and a state is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

  Also, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 052 IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being performed, the second change during the small hit game is also performed. When the updating of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the updating of the second variation time timer is restarted.

  With the above configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second holding memory can be consumed, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a variable winning prize ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the prize ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a prize ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area). In a gaming machine which is configured to provide a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. As described above, a configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, since the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases. However, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed. The frequency of playing is increased, and the occurrence of the change display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed. Can be.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011B). The CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol determination designation command has been transmitted in step 052 IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation, the second special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-hand display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and also performs control to transmit a right-hand lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052 IWS 2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small hit flag is set (step 052 IWS 2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052 IWS2022B).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052 IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and at the same time, Control is performed to transmit a striking start command (step 052 IWS2025B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 052 IWS2026B). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

  However, in this example, even in the case of a small hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit when in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052 IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started again. The processing for transmitting the right-turn lighting start designation command is not performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Normal item control normal processing)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 052 IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag has not been set, the process ends.

  If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 052 IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening timer before opening (step 052 IWS 2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the type of big hit (step 052 IWS 2104), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step 052 IWS2105).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passing waiting process)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052 IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (if set). Step 052 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2504).

  In this characteristic part 072IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passing waiting process, but the passing gate 41 is played. The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Process during big hit opening)
FIG. 9-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is on (step 052 IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has won the special winning opening has been detected, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V-region switch 052IW106 is on (step 052IWS2404). If the V-region switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V-region 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V-region 052IW104. (Step 052 IWS2405).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052 IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the flow shifts to step 052 IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening by 1 (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 052 IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052 IWS 2406) or when the release time timer times out (Y in step 052 IWS 2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. After stopping, the special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052 IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052 IWS 2410). Further, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the round number counter by 1 (step 052 IWS2411).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-big hit opening processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 052IWS2202. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the big hit end display timer to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). The value is set (step 052 IWS2201), and the process ends.

  In step 052 IWS 2202, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052 IWS 2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 052 IWS 2203). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052 IWS 2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052 IWS 2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probable change flag, and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 10R certain jackpot or the 2R certain jackpot (step 052IWS2207). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / low base state (high (Probability / second KT state).

  If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2209). It is to be noted that whether or not it is the 6R probability-change big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052 IWS 2210), and further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052 IWS 2211). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability change big hit, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of the 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display. In step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, Y is determined, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter in step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is the 6R ordinary jackpot or the 2R ordinary jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212) and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 052 IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 052 IWS2214). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 052IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052 IWS 2301), and the process ends.

  In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052 IWS 2303). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052 IWS 2303), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052 IWS 2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is on (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2306) and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. The control is performed (step 052 IWS2307).

  In the present example, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). By executing the processes of steps 052 IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hitting game.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic portion 072IW will be described. FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of transition of the gaming state in the characteristic portion 072IW. First, in the characteristic portion 072IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a shooting operation (left hit) of a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal large hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 9-29, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high base state (high probability / high base / (1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuating display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052 IWS 2212 to S2214).

  After shifting to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature 072IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). For this reason, in the KT state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the second start winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R certain change big hit, a 6R certain change big hit, a 2R certain change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 9-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R certain-variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic part 072IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variation big hit is 30% in total (see FIG. 9-5). In the base state, a high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 30%. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends (see steps 052 IWS 2212 to S2214).

  As shown in FIG. 9-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends (see steps 052 IWS 2212 to S2214). In the characteristic part 072IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal big hit is 30% (see FIGS. 9-5 (D) and (E)). Once in the low probability / high base state, the low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 30%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit has occurred and the low probability / high base state has been established, and the next big hit has not occurred and the 50-time variable display has been completed, FIG. As shown, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A and S69B to S73B).

  As shown in FIG. 9-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic part 072IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is 40. % (See FIGS. 9D and 9E), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 40%. Also, if a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends (see steps 052 IWS 2212 to S2214).

  In FIG. 9-29, the case where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the fluctuation of the second special symbol is changed at a low rate. A display may be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Also, in FIG. 9-29, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 9-29, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Also, in FIG. 9-29, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal design process)
Next, the ordinary symbol processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the ordinary symbol process process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control for transmitting a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 052 IWS 5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 052 IWS 5113).

  In the characteristic unit 072IW, when the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, the gate passing designation command is transmitted. In this characteristic portion 072IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays the role of an operating area. However, after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, is the gate passing waiting state before starting the big hit game? Regardless of whether the command is passed or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In this characteristic part 072IW, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in the step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing in the step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol variation display is executed, and even when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol is displayed. May not be executed.

  In the characteristic part 072IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area. However, the special symbol processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since the process is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region is performed, and then the process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start region. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage processing (step 052 IWS 5113): The CPU 103 sets the count value (the number of gate passage storage) of the gate passage storage counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to the maximum value (in this example, “ 4)). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the general-purpose reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing the same in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage storages.

  Ordinary symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS 5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052 IWS 5100, specifically, the ordinary symbol) In the case where the display of the ordinary symbol is not displayed on the display 20 and the opening and closing operation of the variable prize ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20 is not performed, the gate passage storage is performed. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol change process (step 052 IWS 5101).

  Ordinary symbol variation processing (step 052 IWS 5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time to the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS 5102).

  Ordinary symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS 5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS 5100). On the other hand, if the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “3”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory pre-opening process (step 052IWS5103).

  Normal electric accessory opening pre-processing (step 052 IWS 5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory actuation time in the ordinary symbol process timer and sets the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 052IWS5104).

  Normal electric accessory actuation process (step 052 IWS 5104): The CPU 103 measures a normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 052 IWS 5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passage storage number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (Y in step 052 IWS5121), the process is terminated. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N in Step 052 IWS 5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number for normal symbol per contact determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (Step 052 IWS 5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of gate pass storage numbers are always the same as the order of the gate pass storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 They match.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol hit determination random number value) by using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol. Is determined (step 052 IWS5127). In the feature part 072IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99/100 regardless of whether the state is the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state. The probability is decided to be a normal symbol.

  In step 052IWS5127, when the read-out normal symbol hit determination random number is within the hit range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. In addition, in step 052IWS5127, when the read-out normal symbol hit determination random number is not within the hit range (in the case of a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

  In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag has been set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol process timer (Y in step 052IWS5130, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 seconds in the ordinary symbol process timer (N in Step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 052 IWS 5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 052 IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS 3702), the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052 IWS 3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (step 052 IWS 5127). Is confirmed) (step 052 IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step 052 IWS5127, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

  When it is determined that the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 052 IWS3708).

  In step 052 IWS 3703, when the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052 IWS 3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052 IWS 3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3706). When the high base flag is not set, that is, when the normal state or the second KT state is set, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3705). .

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Ordinary electric accessory opening pre-processing)
FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 052 IWS 5103). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 052 IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802), the processing is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag has been set (step 052IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3805). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state is set, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is set to a state in which the second start winning opening is easier to start and win than the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

  It should be noted that the method of controlling the second starting winning opening so as to make it easier to start the winning when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method shown by the characteristic portion 072IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened). The number of times of opening the variable prize ball device 6B may be set to two times in the first KT state while the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to one. In this case, in the first KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened can be increased to make it easier for the second starting winning opening to start.

  In addition, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B described above and the variable winning ball device 6B May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors product operation process (step 052IWS3807) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 9-34 to 9-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 052 IWS 611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052 IWS 613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in a set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 052). 052IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step 052 IWS 616), effect control CPU 120 stores the received fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 052 IWS 617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052 IWS 618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 052IWS619), effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

  If the received effect control command is any one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (the first symbol confirmation designation command, the second symbol confirmation designation command, the first forced symbol confirmation designation command, the second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052IWS621) The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052 IWS 622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. In addition, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the big hit start designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS 625).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052 IWS 626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS 627). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS 628).

  In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS 624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

  Note that, for example, a setting value suggestion effect indicating the current setting value may be executed by changing a display mode (for example, a display color) of the right-hand display displayed during the big hit game. For example, when right-handed display is started in step 052 IWS624, right-handed display of a normally white display color is started, whereas when execution of a set value suggestive effect is determined, set value “1” is set. , The right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and the set value “2” is used to start the right-handed display of the green display color at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "3", right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high ratio, and when the set value is "4", the right display of the orange display color is started at a relatively high ratio. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the setting value is "5", the setting is "6". Right-handed display of a rainbow display color may be started.

  Also, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, the display color) of the right-handed display is changed and set at the timing of the big hit game end. You may comprise so that a value suggestion effect may be performed.

  Also, for example, when the fluctuating display is completed 50 times in the low probability / first KT state and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered, left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, display color) of the display may be changed to execute the setting value suggestion effect. In such a case, when the control of the game state is switched in some form, the setting value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052 IWS 629), effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS 630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052 IWS 631), effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052 IWS 632).

  If the received effect control command is a display command for opening the special winning opening (step 052IWS633), the effect controlling CPU 120 determines the number of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052 IWS 634). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening opening flag for designating that the special winning opening is being opened (it is a round period during a big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

  In the present example, the value of the winning counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the special winning opening opening display command (timing of starting the round) by executing the process of step 052 IWS 634, which is extremely rare. Also, when an over-winning is detected in the interval period after the round period ends, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

  If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the special winning opening (step 052 IWS 636), the effect controlling CPU 120 sets a post-winning opening flag that designates an interval period after the opening of the special winning opening. (Step 052 IWS 637).

  If the received effect control command is a right-stroke lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of right-strike notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

  If the received effect control command is a right-turn lighting end designation command (step 052 IWS 640), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-turn notification LED 37 (step 052 IWS 641).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step 072IWS001), the effect controlling CPU 101 stores the received symbol designating command in the first available free space in the pre-reading determination result command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step 072 IWS002).

  If the received effect control command is any of the variable category commands (step 072IWS003), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in each storage area of the prefetch determination result command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designating command is stored (step 072IWS004).

  If the received effect control command is the first effective start winning designation command or the second effective start winning designation command (step 072IWS005), the effect control CPU 101 receives the first effective start winning designation command or the second effective start winning command. The designated command is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designating command is stored in each storage area of the pre-reading determination result command storage area formed in the RAM (step 072IWS006).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (blue background image) is performed (step 052 IWS643). If set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052 IWS 644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

  In this example, during the big hit game (except during the big hit game based on the 2R probable big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the game ball wins in the big winning opening or the special winning opening in the high probability / second KT state. When a ball is won, the value of the number-of-prize-ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667). By executing the process of step 052IWS645, the gaming state has a low probability / When the variable display is completed 50 times after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the low probability / low base state is reached, the value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to zero.

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a low probability / background image according to the first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (green background image) is performed (step 052 IWS647). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052 IWS648), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 052 IWS649).

  If the received effect control command is a high-precision / first KT background designation command (step 052 IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (yellow background image) is performed (step 052 IWS651). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052 IWS 652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052 IWS 653).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (red background image) is performed (step 052 IWS655). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and, if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

  If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS658), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a big hit game based on a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit is being played. (Step 052 IWS659). It is determined whether or not a big hit game based on the 10R certain-variable big hit, the 6R certain-big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is performed, for example, when the value of the staging control process flag is from the big hit middle staging process (step S176) to the ending staging process (step S177). ) And whether or not the display result designation commands stored in the display result designation command storage area are the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined.

  If a big hit game based on the 10R certain big hit, 6R certain big hit, or 6R normal big hit is being played, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS660). Further, effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball counter after the addition (step 052IWS661). The display of the number of prize balls is the display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability / second KT state.

  By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS 658 to S661, in this example, a prize ball is generated based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening during a jackpot game based on a 10R certain jackpot, a 6R certain jackpot, or a 6R regular jackpot. The value of the number counter and the display of the number of award balls are updated. On the other hand, even when the big hit game is being played, if a prize to the big winning prize port occurs during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the prize ball is not updated. Numerals are not updated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-win winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing an over-win winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). In addition, the “proposed effect at the time of over-winning” is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the special winning opening occurs, and is an effect indicating the currently set value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing an award ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). The “prize ball number display suggestion effect” is a predetermined number of prize balls paid out based on winning in a special winning opening or a special winning opening during a jackpot game or a high probability / second KT state. This is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and suggests the currently set value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing an award ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). The “prize ball number emphasizing effect” is a predetermined number of prize balls paid out based on winning in a special winning opening or a special winning opening during a jackpot game or a high probability / second KT state. (In this example, it is an effect of highlighting that the number has reached 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000, and 5,000).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the high probability / in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of winning balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the number-of-winning balls counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

  In the present example, the processing of steps 052 IWS 665 to S668 is executed, and in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball are determined based on the fact that a small hit has occurred during the high probability / second KT state and a prize has been won in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated. The award ball number display is not updated (however, the value of the award ball number counter is not updated, but is not updated until the value of the award ball number counter is reset).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). The "small win winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a winning in the special winning opening occurs, and suggests the currently set value. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052 IWS 663 to execute an effect process for suggesting the number of prize balls to be displayed (step 052 IWS 663). Next, effect control CPU 120 executes award ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052 IWS664).

  If the received effect control command is any other command, effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052 IWS670). ). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS 611.

(Suggested production processing when winning over)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing the over-win winning suggestion effect process (step 052 IWS 662). In the over-win winning suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the winning counter after addition is equal to or greater than 11 (step 052 IWS 302). If the value of the winning number counter is equal to or greater than 11 (that is, if an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the over-winning suggested effect is present and the type thereof. The lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the over-prize-winning suggested effect determination table to determine the presence / absence and type of over-win-win suggested effect (step 052IWS303).

  FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the over-winning-time suggested effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the over-prize suggestion effect determination table includes no over-prize suggestion effect, over-prize suggestion effect A, over-prize suggestion effect B, over-prize suggestion effect C, and over-prize effect. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E when over winning, and the suggestion effect F when over winning.

  As shown in FIG. 9-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) in a normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. Is displayed, and a winning sound of a normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the “prize effect at the time of over-winning prize A” is executed, the winning display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R, a winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound is output. Further, when the “indicating effect B at the time of over-winning” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is received from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. Further, when the “prize effect C for over-winning” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound C different from the normal sound is received from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. Further, when the “prize effect D at the time of over-winning” is executed, a winning display is displayed on the image display device 5 in an orange display color, and a winning of the sound D different from the normal sound is received from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when “over-winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is received from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect F” is executed, the winning display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a rainbow display color, and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-39, different judgment values are assigned to the over-prize-winning suggested effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is one of the setting values “1” to “6”. In step 052 IWS 303, effect control CPU 120 checks the storage content of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence / absence and type of the over-prize winning suggested effect are determined.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-39, in the present example, when the set value is “1”, the rate at which the execution of the over-win winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is “2”, the ratio at which the execution of the over-win winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the execution ratio of the over-win winning suggestion effect C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the setting value is “4”, the ratio at which the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over-winning is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is “5”, the ratio at which the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over-winning is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is “6”, the ratio at which the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over-winning is determined is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 39, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-prize-time suggested effect obtained by summing the over-prize-time suggested effects A to F is: 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is “2”, 50% when the set value is “3”, and the set value When it is “4”, it is 55%, when it is “5”, it is 60%, and when it is “6”, it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the rate of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small-hit winning suggestion effect described later. I have.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the over-prize-winning suggested effect has been determined in step 052 IWS 303 (step 052 IWS 304). If the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-prize is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the determined type of the suggestion effect at the time of the over-prize (step 052IWS305). . For example, if the execution of the suggestion effect A at the time of the over winning is determined, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display with a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound corresponding to the determined type of over-win winning suggestion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS306). For example, if the execution of the suggestion effect A at the time of the over winning is determined, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052 IWS 302) or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over-winning (N in step 052 IWS 304), the effect control CPU 120 sets the image display device 5. In, control for displaying the winning display in a normal display color (white in this example) is performed (step 052IWS307). The effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound of a normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion effect processing when winning a small hit)
FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the small-lot-win winning suggestion effect process (step 052 IWS669). In the small hit prize suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a small hit prize suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and the type of the small hit prize suggestion effect. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggested effect at the time of the small hit prize are determined (step 052IWS321).

  FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the small-hit winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-41, in the small hit prize suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit prize suggestion effect, the small hit prize suggestion effect A, the small hit prize suggestion effect B, and the small hit prize suggestion effect. Determination values are assigned to C, small-hit winning suggestion effect D, small-hit winning suggestion effect E, and small-hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 9-41, in the present example, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10" in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5 is performed. Is displayed, and a winning sound of a normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-41, when the “small-hit winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. When the “small hit winning suggestion effect B” is executed, the winning display is displayed in green on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. When the “small winning prize suggestion effect C” is executed, the prize display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. When the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. When the “small hit winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize presentation effect F” is executed, the prize display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a rainbow display color, and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output.

  As shown in FIG. 9-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current setting value is one of the setting values “1” to “6”. . In step 052 IWS 321, the effect control CPU 120 checks the storage content of the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value, the presence / absence and type of the small-hit winning prize presentation effect are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 9-41, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of the small hit prize winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the setting value is “2”, the ratio at which the execution of the small-hit-win winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the ratio at which the execution of the small-hit-win winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the setting value is “4”, the ratio at which the execution of the small-hit-win winning suggestion effect D is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “5”, the ratio at which the execution of the small hit prize suggestion effect E is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is “6”, the rate at which the execution of the small-hit-win winning suggestion effect F is determined is relatively high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41, in the present example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit prize-winning suggestion effect obtained by summing the small hit prize-winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is “2”, 7% when the set value is “3”, and 4% ”Is 8%, 9% if the set value is“ 5 ”, and 10% if the set value is“ 6 ”. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit prize suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-win prize suggestion effect described above.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to execute the small hit prize suggestion effect in step 052 IWS 321 (step 052 IWS 322). If the execution of the small-hit winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display according to the determined small-win winning suggestion type (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is determined that the small-hit winning suggestion effect A is to be executed, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound in accordance with the determined small hit winning suggestion effect type from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is determined to execute the small-hit winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output a winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize (N in step 052 IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the prize display on the image display device 5 in a normal display color (white in this example). (Step 052 IWS 325). Further, effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound of a normal sound from speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

  Note that the reliability of the setting value suggestion may be different between the case where the over-winning suggestion effect is executed and the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. For example, the suggestion effect F at the time of an over winning can be executed at any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”. The configuration may be such that if the winning suggestion effect F is executed, the set value is “6”. Conversely, for example, the small-prize winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is “6”. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the set value “6” is determined if the over-win winning suggestion effect F is executed.

  In the present example, the over-prize winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect make the display mode (display color in this example) of the winning display different from normal and output a winning sound different from normal. Although the case of executing according to the embodiment has been described, the embodiment is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, by setting only one of the display mode of the winning display (in this example, the display color) and the winning sound different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. Further, for example, by displaying an effect display at the timing of occurrence of an over winning or a winning in a special winning opening, or by changing a display color of a lamp or an LED, a suggestion effect at the time of an over winning or a small hit winning is achieved. You may comprise so that a time suggestion effect may be performed.

(Prize ball number display suggestion effect processing)
FIG. 9-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052 IWS663). In the award ball number display suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the value of the award ball number counter has reached 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15; therefore, in step 052IWS341, the effect control If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be determined, specifically, by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect, and selects a lottery based on a random number. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052 IWS343). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the awarded ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the value is equal to or greater than the set value “4”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In the present example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value “4”. ”Or more.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has not reached 456 first (N in step 052 IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first (step S52). Step 052 IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in the step 052IWS344, the effect control If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

  If the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” can be determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the award ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number display suggestion effect B exists. Is determined (step 052 IWS346). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as “555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5 and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the value is equal to or greater than the set value “5”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In the present example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”. ”Or more.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has not reached 555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 for the first time ( Step 052 IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15, so that in step 052IWS347, the effect control If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has first reached 666.

  If the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615). If the current set value is the set value “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number display suggestion effect C exists. It is determined (step 052 IWS349). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5 and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In the present example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value “6” is used. It will be decided.

  If the value of the prize ball counter has not reached 666 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2456 for the first time ( Step 052 IWS350). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 winning balls will be obtained, and if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state, 10 winning balls will be obtained. Is obtained and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10 at a time. In step 052 IWS 350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number is 2460 or 2465 if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2456 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” (step 052 IWS 351). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be determined, specifically, by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615). If the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball number display suggestive effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number display suggestive effect D exists. Is determined (step 052 IWS352). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect D is executed, a character display such as “2456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5 and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the value is equal to or greater than the set value “4”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value “4”. The above is determined.

  If the value of the prize ball counter has not reached 2456 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2555 for the first time ( Step 052 IWS 353). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 winning balls will be obtained, and if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state, 10 winning balls will be obtained. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10 at a time. In step 052 IWS 353, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number is 2555 or 2560 if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter has first reached 2555.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” (step 052 IWS 354). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” can be determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number display suggestion effect E exists. Is determined (step 052 IWS355). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5 and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the value is equal to or greater than the set value “5”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value “5”. The above is determined.

  If the value of the prize ball number counter has not reached 2555 for the first time (N in step 052 IWS 353), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2666 for the first time ( Step 052 IWS 356). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 winning balls will be obtained, and if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state, 10 winning balls will be obtained. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10 at a time. In step 052 IWS 356, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number is 2670 or 2675 if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

  If the value of the prize ball counter has first reached 2666, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be determined by checking the storage contents of the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615). If the current set value is the set value “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number display suggestion effect F exists. It is determined (step 052 IWS358). Then, control goes to a step 052 IWS359.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the awarded ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIGS. 9-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In the present example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value “6” is used. It will be decided.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award ball number display suggesting effect has been determined in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, when the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect A is determined, control for displaying a character display such as “456 OVER” on the image display device 5 is performed.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-43, when viewing the award ball number display suggestive effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game, the period of the big hit game becomes longer and the number of award balls increases. , The execution probabilities of the prize ball number display suggesting effects decrease to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value “4” or more is determined, the set value “5” or more is determined, and the set value “ 6 "The accuracy of the confirmation and the suggestion of the set value has been increased. Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, when viewing the prize ball number display suggestive effects DF executed during the period of the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH As the period of the game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggesting effect decreases to 5%, 3% and 2%, while the set value “4” or more is determined and set value. The accuracy of the determination of “5” or more and the determination of the set value “6” and the suggestion of the set value are increased.

  In addition, not only in the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestive effect increases. You may comprise so that it may be. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of the suggestion of the set value may be reduced.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, as shown in FIGS. 9-43, prize ball display suggestions effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game, and prize ball number display suggestions executed during the small hit RUSH period Although the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed with the same execution probability. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production process)
FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052 IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has first reached the threshold value of 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000). Is confirmed (step 052 IWS 371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15, so that in step 052IWS371, the effect control For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 1000 first. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000 first. For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000 first. For example, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000 first.

  If the value of the number-of-prize-ball counter has reached the threshold value for each 1000 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize-ball number-enhanced effect determination table for determining whether or not there is an award-ball number-enhanced effect, and generates a random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052 IWS372).

FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the awarded ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the number-of-prize-ball emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the number-of-prize-ball emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, “4000
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed. In this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a 90% probability. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award-ball number emphasis effect has been determined in step 052 IWS 372 (step 052 IWS 373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if the execution of the prize-ball number emphasizing effect A is determined, control is performed to display a character display such as “1000 OVER” on the image display device 5.

  In this example, a case is shown in which the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the present invention is not limited to the case where the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed in all of these cases, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the prize ball number reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000. You may comprise. In addition, for example, a configuration may also be adopted in which the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed even when the prize ball number reaches 6000 or 7000, and various modes are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 9-44 and 9-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 9-42 and 9-43, and is independent of the current setting value. It is an effect decided and executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be executed in a mode suggesting the current setting value. For example, if the display color is different from the normal display, “1000 OVER” or “2000
The present setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as “OVER”.

(Prefetch notice setting process)
The feature unit 072IW is configured to be able to execute a small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect indicating that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues or ends as a prefetch notice effect. In the small hit RUSH look-ahead suggestion effect, a type of effect that suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is continued is called a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a continuation suggestion effect). A type of effect that is different from the RUSH continuation suggestion effect and that indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends is referred to as a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect (hereinafter, also simply referred to as an end suggestion effect).

  FIG. 9-46 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the prefetch notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is being executed (step 072IWS101). Whether or not the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is being performed can be determined by various methods. For example, a predetermined execution flag is set when starting the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect. Then, the configuration may be such that the execution flag is reset when the execution is completed, and the determination may be made by checking the state of the execution flag.

  When the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets one set of starting prize commands (ie, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and an effective starting prize designating command (first It is checked whether or not a new set of the effective start winning designation command or the second effective start winning designation command) has been received (step 072 IWS102). Specifically, a set of a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a valid start prize designation command (a first valid start prize designation command or a second valid start prize designation command) are newly stored in the start prize winning command storage area. Can be confirmed by determining whether the If one set of start winning commands has not been newly received, the process ends.

  If a set of start winning commands has been newly received, the effect control CPU 120 sets the newly received effective start winning designation command (effective start winning designation command newly stored in the start winning command storage area). ) Is determined to be a second effective start winning designation command (step 072 IWS103). If the second valid start winning designation command has not been newly received (that is, if the first valid start winning designation command has been received), the process is terminated as it is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the control is in the second KT state (step 072 IWS 104). Note that whether or not the second KT state is controlled can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second KT state flag is set. If it is controlled to the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first special symbol is being changed and displayed (step 072 IWS 105). Whether or not the first special symbol is being changed can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a change pattern command designating the first change pattern has been received.

  If the first special symbol is not being fluctuated, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not there is a first hold storage (step 072 IWS 106). Whether or not there is the first hold storage can be determined, for example, by confirming an effect control command specifying the first hold storage number received from the game control microcomputer 100. If there is no first suspension storage, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second suspension storage number is 2 or more (step 072 IWS107). Whether or not the second reserved storage number is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming an effect control command specifying the second reserved storage number received from the game control microcomputer 100.

  If the number of the second reserved storages is two or more, the effect control CPU 120 reads all the prefetch determination result commands for the variable display of the second special symbol (step 072IWS108).

  In the present example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) generates a start winning at the first starting winning opening in the first starting winning determination process (step S101A) of the first special symbol process process. Then, whether or not the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is a big hit and the type of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) are determined in advance, and a prefetch determination result command indicating the determination result is transmitted. In the present example, similarly, in the second special winning process determination processing of the second special symbol process processing, the microcomputer 100 for game control also determines that the first winning winning in the second special winning opening is the starting winning. The pre-read determination is made as to whether the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation category), and a pre-read determination result command indicating the determination result is transmitted.

  In the command analysis processing (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received prefetch determination result command in the prefetch determination result command storage area provided in the RAM 122. In this example, since the upper limit number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is 4, the prefetch determination result command storage area has four storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage, respectively. An area is provided.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not any of the read-ahead pre-reading determination result commands indicates a pre-reading determination result of the 10R certainty-change jackpot (step 072IWS109). If there is a result indicating the pre-reading determination result of the 10R probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the first pre-reading suggestion effect determination table, and performs the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect. The presence / absence of execution and the type and mode of execution are determined (step 072 IWS 112).

  FIG. 9-47 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first look-ahead suggestion effect determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), when there is a thing indicating the pre-read judgment result of the 10R certainty variable big hit, the continuous suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH pre-read suggestion effect can be executed. It is configured as follows. In addition, a first continuation suggestion effect, a second continuation suggestion effect, and a third continuation suggestion effect are provided as continuation suggestion effects having different effect modes. In addition, it is determined that there is no execution with a probability of 0% (that is, it is determined that there is execution with a probability of 100%), it is determined that the first continuation suggestion effect is to be executed with a probability of 10%, and the second continuation suggestion is performed with a probability of 30%. The determination value corresponding to the random number is assigned so that it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is determined that the third continuation suggestion effect is to be executed with a probability of 60%.

  In addition, in the feature part 072IW, when there is a thing showing the pre-reading determination result of the 10R probability change big hit, it is configured such that the continuation suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect can be executed. The present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and it may be possible to execute the continuation suggestion effect also in the case where there is a result indicating the pre-read determination result of the 2R probability change big hit (that is, when the small hit RUSH is continued and does not end).

  If there is no one indicating the pre-reading determination result of the 10R certain-variable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not there is any one of the read-out pre-reading determination result commands that indicates the pre-reading determination result of the 2R normal big hit ( Step 072 IWS110). If there is a result indicating the 2R normal big hit look-ahead determination result, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the second look-ahead suggestion effect determination table, and performs the small hit RUSH look-ahead suggestion effect. The presence / absence of execution and the type and mode of execution are determined (step 072 IWS113).

  FIG. 9-47 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second look-ahead suggestion effect determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), if there is a 2R normal big hit look-ahead determination result, an end suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH pre-read suggestion effect can be executed. It is configured as follows. Further, a first end suggestion effect and a second end suggestion effect are provided as end suggestion effects having different effect modes. Also, it is determined that no execution is performed with a probability of 10%, the first end suggestion effect is determined to be executed with a probability of 30%, and the second end suggestion effect is determined to be executed with a probability of 60%. Is assigned.

  In addition, in the feature part 072IW, when there is a thing showing the pre-read determination result of the 2R normal big hit (that is, when the small hit RUSH ends and shifts to the low probability / first KT state), the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion is made. Although it is configured such that the end suggestion effect among the effects can be executed, the present invention is not limited to such a structure, and there is a case where there is a result indicating the pre-reading determination result of the 6R probability change big hit (that is, the small hit RUSH is ended). , High probability / transition to the first KT state), the continuation suggestion effect may be executable.

  If there is no one indicating the 2R normal big hit prefetch determination result, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not there is a readout prefetch determination result command that indicates the small hit prefetch determination result (step 072 IWS1101). If there is a small hit prefetch determination result, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the third prefetch suggestion effect determination table, and executes the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect. Is determined, and the type and mode of execution are determined (step 072 IWS114).

  FIG. 9-47 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third look-ahead suggestion effect determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), when there is a small hit prefetch determination result, the small hit RUSH pre-read suggestion effect of the continuous suggestion effect and the end suggestion effect Both are configured to be executable. Also, it is determined that there is no execution at a probability of 35%, it is determined that the first continuous suggestion effect is to be executed at a probability of 20%, it is determined that the second continuous suggestion effect is to be executed at a probability of 10%, and at a probability of 5%. A determination corresponding to a random number, which is determined to execute the third continuation suggestion effect, determined to execute the first end suggestion effect with a probability of 20%, and determined to execute the second end suggestion effect with a probability of 10%. A value has been assigned.

  Here, when the end suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that there is a small hit prefetch determination result, the suggestion content of the effect does not match the result, and the result is a so-called gaseous effect.

  In addition, in the feature part 072IW, when there is a thing showing the pre-reading judgment result of the small hit, both the continuous suggestion effect and the end suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and even when there is a result indicating a prefetch determination result of an outlier (that is, when the small hit RUSH does not end), both the continuous suggestion effect and the end suggestion effect are executed. It may be possible. In addition, in the present characteristic part 072IW, when there is a thing showing the prefetch judgment result of the big hit and when there is a thing showing the prefetch judgment result of the small hit, the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect can be executed. For example, the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect can be executed only when there is a big hit prefetch judgment result, and the small hit (and out) prefetch judgment result is used. The RUSH prefetch suggestion effect (or one of the continuation suggestion effect and the end suggestion effect) may not be executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the feature portion 072IW, when a large hit does not occur in the small hit RUSH state, the small hit occurs at an extremely high rate. In the small hit RUSH state, if the big hit does not become a big hit, the small hit will be made at a rate of about 50%, and if it is not a small hit, it will be a small hit. The effect may be made executable (that is, an effect whose suggestion content does not match the result may be made executable).

  If it is determined in any of steps 072IWS112 to 072IWS114 that the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display targeted for the prefetch notice ends according to the determination result (or As described later, the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is executed (until the variable display of the first special symbol is started or the first hold storage is stored) (step 072IWS115). That is, until a variable display corresponding to one of the pre-read determination results of the 10R certain variable big hit, the 2R normal big hit, and the small hit is completed (or until a predetermined timing during the corresponding variable display), the small hit is made over a plurality of variable displays. The RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is executed, and it is suggested that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues or ends.

  If the state is not the second KT state (N in step 072 IWS 104), the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed (Y in step 072 IWS 105), if there is a first hold storage (Y in step 072 IWS 106), the second hold If the number of storages is not 2 or more (N in step 072 IWS 107), the process is terminated as it is, and the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is not executed.

  If the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is being executed (Y in step 072IWS101), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step 072IWS116). . Whether or not the first special symbol is being changed can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a change pattern command designating the first change pattern has been received.

  If the first special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not there is a first hold memory (step 072IWS117). Whether or not there is the first hold storage can be determined, for example, by confirming an effect control command specifying the first hold storage number received from the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (Y in step 072 IWS 116) or when there is a first hold storage (Y in step 072 IWS 117), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit RUSH destination being executed. The reading suggestion effect ends (step 072 IWS 118).

  On the other hand, if the display of the first special symbol is not being changed (N in step 072 IWS 116) and there is no first hold storage (N in step 072 IWS 117), the process is terminated as it is. That is, the execution of the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 9-47, the characteristic portion 072IW is configured so that the execution ratios of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect are different from each other. Specifically, the rate at which the 10R probability variable hit occurs (35% in the example shown in FIG. 9-5 (B)) and the rate at which the 2R normal variable hit occurs (30% in the example) are different from each other. At which the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is to be executed (100% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (A)) and the ratio at which the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is to be executed at the time of 2R normal big hit (90% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (B)), and the ratio determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect at the time of the small hit (the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (C)). 35%) and the ratio (30% in the example) for determining that the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is to be executed is realized. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  In the feature part 072IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, so that the small hit RUSH prefetching is performed as a prefetch notice effect for the variable display of the second special symbol. If a large hit or a small hit occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed while the suggestion effect is being performed, a mismatch between the content of the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect and the actual result occurs. turn into. Therefore, in the feature part 072IW, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH end suggestion are provided on the condition that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not executed by the processing of steps 072IWS105 to 072IWS106 and steps 072IWS116 to 072IWS127. It is configured to be able to perform effects. With such a configuration, the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 072IW, as shown in FIG. 9-47, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed and the small hit RUSH is continued, and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed and the small hit RUSH is continued. Are different from each other. Specifically, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, a 10R certain variable big hit or a small hit is obtained, and the small hit RUSH is continued in any case. In other words, it is determined that the small hit RUSH will continue until the hold memory held at the time when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed is exhausted. On the other hand, when the small hit RUSH end suggesting effect is executed, the 2R normal big hit or the small hit occurs, and in the case of the 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH is not continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  As shown in FIG. 9-47, in the characteristic portion 072IW, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the small hit RUSH ends is smaller than when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed. It is configured to be low. Specifically, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, it becomes 10R probability variable big hit or small hit, and the small hit RUSH does not end in any case, but when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, A 2R normal big hit or a small hit is reached, and in the case of a 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  As shown in FIG. 9-47, the characteristic portion 072IW is configured such that the number of production modes of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the number of production modes of the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect are different from each other. (For example, a first continuation suggestion effect, a second continuation suggestion effect, and a third continuation suggestion effect are provided as the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effects having different production modes, and the first hit RUSH end suggestion effects having different production modes are the first RUSH end suggestion effects. An end suggestion effect and a second end suggestion effect are provided). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 072IW, by executing the process of step 072IWS115, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests that the small hit RUSH will be continued over a plurality of variable displays as the small hit RUSH continuation indicating effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  In addition, in the feature part 072IW, as a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests that a particular type of advantageous state (for example, 10R certain variable big hit) is controlled over a plurality of variable displays, As a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect, an effect that suggests that a special type of advantageous state (for example, 2R normal big hit) is controlled over a plurality of variable displays can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  Further, in the present characteristic unit 072IW, a specific type of advantageous state is controlled at a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect modes performs the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (for example, 3R suggestion effect> second continuation suggestion effect> 1st continuation suggestion effect has a high rate of 10R probability big hits (see FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C)), and any of a plurality of effect modes. Depending on whether the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed depending on the effect mode, a special type of advantageous state is controlled by a different ratio (for example, 2R normal big hit in the order of the second end suggestion effect> the first end suggestion effect). (See FIGS. 9-47 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming ability related to the small hit RUSH, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 072IW, although it is constituted so that the production mode is different between the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect, for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect are provided. Thus, a common effect mode may be set from the start of the effect to a predetermined timing. For example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the variable display of the pre-reading advance notice target is executed or a timing at which the push button 31B is operated) is displayed after the hold display as the target of the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect is displayed in a common mode. , Etc.), the display mode may change to a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, or the display mode may change to a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the small hit RUSH prefetch suggestion effect.

  In addition, the configuration relating to the small hit RUSH look-ahead suggestion effect in the feature part 072IW is applicable to a gaming machine (so-called stochastic falling specification) that performs a lottery every time whether or not to shift from the stochastic state to the non-stochastic state in the stochastic state. Applicable. In this case, for example, a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect may be executed when there is a pre-read determination result indicating a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the probable falling.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 052 IWS 811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 052 IWS 811, it is sufficient to confirm whether the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 052 IWS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. Can be determined by confirming whether If it is not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, if it is to execute the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to perform the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 052 IWS 814). It should be noted that whether or not to perform the variation display of the second special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed), the process is terminated. In the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

  By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS 812 to S 815, in the characteristic portion 072 IW, when the non-KT state is set, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. When the display is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is not the KT state. , The display of the decoration design is not changed.

(Variable display start setting processing)
FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). Note that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. In the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Note that whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit change, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

  As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, only the small hit A can be obtained, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game is performed. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, in the present example, when the process of step 052 IWS 920 to S922 is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

  In the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in Step 052 IWS 920) or in the case of not a small hit variation (N in Step 052 IWS 921), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 052 IWS 923). In step 052 IWS 923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of position), the effect control CPU 120 displays only the out-of-left design or the right-and-left decoration design in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not completely match. The combination of the matched reach-losing symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are arranged at the symbol “7” among the odd symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability big hit), a combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left middle right are arranged in odd numbers other than “7” is determined. When the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability change is a big hit), a combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, symbol “R”) is determined. . When a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in even-numbered symbols. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined that the small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order (step 052 IWS 924). It should be noted that whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 052 IWS 928. If the change is a loss (Y in step 052 IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect indicating the currently set value. (Step 052 IWS 925).

  In step 052 IWS 925, effect control CPU 120 specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052 IWS 615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestive effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestive effect. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion effect.

  FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-50, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes no setting value suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect A, setting value suggestion effect B, setting value suggestion effect C, setting value suggestion effect D, setting value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

  The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. The setting value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The set value suggestion effect C is an effect that is executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 9-50, the setting value “ 6 ", the execution ratio is the highest.

  In the setting value suggestion effect of the characteristic unit 072IW, a form in which the set value set is one of 1 to 6 is suggested as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but is limited to such a form. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may indicate, for example, the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (stationary).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the decorative pattern to be used and the setting value suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. (Step 052 IWS 928).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052 IWS 928 as the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 052 IWS 929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 052 IWS 930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the decoration is performed by executing the step 052 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052 IWS 928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the loss fluctuation).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer, and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 052 IWS 932).

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by one (step 052IWS8101), and also decrements the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer by one (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052 IWS8104). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 052 IWS8105).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 052 IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (1) Whether the confirmation command reception flag is set or not is confirmed (step 052 IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

  If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052 IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052 IWS 923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 052 IWS 8109). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052 IWS 8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (2) whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step 052 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

  If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052 IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052 IWS 923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 052 IWS 8113). Then, CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

  If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052 IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 052 IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decoration symbol variation time timer. It is determined whether or not has timed out (step 052 IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052 IWS8117).

  In this example, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, is being executed. During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a probability change big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game, Then, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 052 IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the updating of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted and the first symbol This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing in steps 052 IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and thereafter, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally the special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. The “stand-by effect” is, for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right of the image display device 5 swings or slightly fluctuates to temporarily stop.

  For example, when the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, or the like, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of the system small symbol and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. When the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Wait processing per special map)
FIG. 9-52 and FIG. 9-53 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting processing (step S173) in the effect control process processing. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 has been set, the flow shifts to step 052 IWS9706. In the characteristic part 072IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the big hit effect has not yet been performed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is performed. The process moves to step 052 IWS 9706 without executing.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 has been set, the flow shifts to step 052 IWS9717. In the characteristic portion 072IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the small hit effect has not yet been performed, so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052 IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052 IWS 9717 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the left-middle-right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed (losing symbol, big hit symbol). , A small hit symbol) is determined (step 052 IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received, and the process of replacing with a shifted symbol is performed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol has been lost. Is controlled to confirm display.

  When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of Step 052 IWS 9703 (Y in Step 052 IWS 9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (Step 052 IWS 9705).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052 IWS 9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display of the number of winning balls is being displayed on image display device 5 (step 052 IWS 9708). If the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that has occurred this time is the 10R certain change big hit, the 6R certain change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit (step 052IWS9709). Whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is determined, for example, by determining whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 6R normal hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS9710).

  By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS 9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when a big hit game based on the 10R certain big hit, the 6R certain big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R certain variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the prize ball number display is not started.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 052 IWS 9711). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 052 IWS 9712), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

  If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 052 IWS 9703 (N in step 052 IWS 9704), and if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 052 IWS 9703 (Y in step 052 IWS 9715), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052 IWS9716).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 052 IWS 9717). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052 IWS9718).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit medium-duration effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 052 IWS9720), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the small hit effect effect processing (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

  If a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052 IWS 9703 (that is, if a lost symbol is displayed) (N in step 052 IWS 9704 and N in step 052 IWS 9715), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052 IWS 9723).

(Ending production process)
FIG. 9-54 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit mid-game effect process (see step S176). Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052 IWS 952).

  When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS 952), effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052 IWS 953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the content of process data n. , The game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) (step 052IWS954). For example, effects such as displaying that the big hit is finished or displaying a predetermined character are executed.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052 IWS 955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052 IWS 956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 052 IWS957).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052 IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the big hit game to be ended this time is a big hit game based on the 6R probable big hit or 6R normal big hit (step). 052IWS958). It should be noted that whether the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

  In this example, in the case of executing the big hit game based on the 6R probable big hit or the 6R normal big hit by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS958 to S959, the number of prize balls is displayed during the big hit game, and the big hit is displayed. When the game is over, the display of the number of prize balls is erased, and the display of the number of prize balls is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state after the end of the big hit game.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R-probable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Note that whether or not the 2R-probable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability change big hit, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS 961). If the award ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the award ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

  In this example, when the big hit game based on the 2R-probable variable big hit is executed by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS 960 to S962, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (however, In this example, when the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability changing big hit, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated.) / In the second KT state, a prize ball number display is displayed.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052 IWS 963).

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the effect performed in the feature unit 072IW. First, a description will be given of an effect mode of a continuation suggestion effect that indicates the continuation of the small hit RUSH.

  FIG. 9-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

  In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (A), for example, a character display 072IW001 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (A), when the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration pattern is executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hitting RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which the predetermined effect images 072IW002 and 072IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case is shown in which an image of a racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images 072IW002 and 072IW003. In this case, for example, when the first continuation suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (B1), a predetermined display color is displayed in white on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a manner of displaying the effect image 072IW002. For example, when performing the third continuation suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (B2), a predetermined effect is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a manner of displaying the image 072IW003.

  In this example, during the variation display of the decorative symbol in the second KT state, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect of which effect mode is executed is determined. It is possible to give an expectation to the user that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues.

  Next, a description will be given of a presentation mode of an end suggestion effect indicating the end of the small hit RUSH. FIG. 9-56 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect. In this example, a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect can be executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH). In the example shown in FIGS. 9-56, the screen display transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C1) or (A), (B), (C2).

  In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), for example, a character display 072IW001 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), when the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration symbol is performed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is performed. , A small hit RUSH end suggesting effect is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the present example, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (A), a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image 072IW004 is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that, in this example, a case where an image including the character “end?” In a frame is displayed as the predetermined effect image 072IW004. In this case, for example, when the first end suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the small hit RUSH is displayed by displaying the effect image including the white character “end?” On the image display device 5. An end suggestion effect is performed. For example, when the second end suggestion effect of the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the small hit RUSH end is displayed in a manner in which an effect image including a red character “end?” Is displayed on the image display device 5. A suggestion effect is performed.

  Next, when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect proceeds (for example, when a new variable display is started), the display color in the frame of the effect image 072IW004 changes on the image display device 5 (for example, in the frame of the effect image). Display control is performed (the color approaches black). Then, when the effect of suggesting the end of the small hit RUSH further proceeds (for example, immediately before the variable display to be foreseeable advance notice is stopped), the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The display color in the frame of 072IW004 further changes, and an operation promotion image 072IW005 that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

  When the operation of the push button 31B is detected, if the display result is the 2R normal big hit (that is, the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends), as shown in FIG. 9-56 (C1). In the image display device 5, display control is performed such that the display color in the frame of the effect image 072IW004 changes to black and the character in the frame is “end”. On the other hand, when the display result is a small hit (that is, when the second KT state (small hit RUSH) does not end and continues), as shown in FIG. 9-56 (C2), the effect image 072IW004 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed.

  In the present example, during the variation display of the decorative symbol in the second KT state, the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed or the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect of any effect mode is executed. The user can be made to pay attention to whether or not the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends.

  Although the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56 have a low degree of commonality in the production mode, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. This is an effect mode with a high degree of commonality, in which the color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed becomes blue when the RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, and the color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed becomes red when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed. You may.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. FIG. 9-57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect. In the present example, a setting value suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol that is a loss. As shown in FIG. 9-57 (A), when the display timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached when the display of the middle left and right decorative symbols is being changed on the image display device 5, the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (3) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-57 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which predetermined image images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B1), the setting is performed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. A value suggestion effect is performed. For example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B2), the set value is set in such a manner that the predetermined character image 052IW002 is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5. A suggestion effect is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-57 (B3), the set value is set in such a manner that the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. A suggestion effect is performed.

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 57, the case where the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect C, and the setting value suggestion effect E are executed is described. For example, when the setting value suggestion effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when a set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when a set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color.

  In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

  Next, the display mode of the right strike notification will be described. FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. In the present example, regardless of whether the first special symbol has a big hit in the variable display or the second special symbol has been changed and the variable display has been executed, a big hit is played. As shown in FIG. 9-58 (1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-turn-on lighting start command, the right-turn notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-58 (1) (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (1), the right control display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 (see step 052IWS624).

  Further, in this example, when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 052 IWS2024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-turn-on lighting start command, the right-turn notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-58 (2) (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). . However, unlike during the big hit game, the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-58 (2).

  On the other hand, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game as shown in FIG. 9-58 (3). The hit notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect modes of the suggestion effect at the time of the over-prize, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize, and the suggestion effect at the display of the number of prize balls. FIG. 9-59 and FIG. 9-60 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect states of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. 9-59 and 9-60, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-59 and 9-60, a case where the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the 10R certainty big hit has been achieved is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9-59 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “Big hit!” And a round number display such as “Round 2”. The award ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. When a normal prize (a prize other than an over prize) occurs in the big prize mouth during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in a normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 9-59 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) is displayed, and a winning sound of a normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

  Next, it is assumed that an over-prize is generated during the big hit game, and the execution of the over-prize-winning suggested effect is determined based on the over-prize. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (C), the prize display 052IW010 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) is displayed according to the type of the suggested effect at the time of the over prize, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R, a winning sound is output in accordance with the type of the effect suggested at the time of the over winning (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-win winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5.

  Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls has reached 456, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A has been determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (D), a character display 052IW011 such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

Note that, in this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined, “555” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the award ball number display suggestion effect C is determined, “666” is displayed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggesting effect C is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9E, when the big hit game ends, the game state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game ends. When the state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9F, a character display such as “small hit RUSH!” Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

  Next, when a small game is won during the high probability / second KT state and a game ball is won to the special winning opening, but the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning is not determined, FIG. 9-60. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (character display of “+10” in this example) is displayed in a normal display color (white in this example), and a normal sound is received from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

  Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit is made and a game ball is awarded to the special winning opening, and based on the occurrence of a game ball being awarded to the special winning opening, a suggestion at the time of the small hit winning is made. Is determined to be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9G, a winning display 052IW013 (in this example, a character display of “+10”) is displayed according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, a prize sound corresponding to the determined type of the small hit prize presentation effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small-hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in blue on the image display device 5.

  Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-60 (H), the character display 052IW014 such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the award ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

  In this example, the case where the number-of-prize-balls display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the number-of-prize-balls display suggestion effect D is determined, “2456” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and a prize ball number display suggesting effect D is executed. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-59 and 9-60, although illustration is omitted, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on, for example, that the number of prize balls has reached 1,000. In this case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , A prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3000, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , An award ball number emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined based on the prize ball number reaching 4000, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , A prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 5000, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , An award ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

  In this example, the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, during a big hit game or a small hit in the high probability / second KT state). (Sum of the game value given by (1)), the number of prize ball display suggestion effects A to F is executed at different selection ratios, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of times of performing the variable display performed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F have different selection ratios. May be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

  Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed. FIG. 9-61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is changed to a large change (in this example, 10R certain change). In the case of a big hit change that is a big hit or a 6R probability change big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the ordinary accessory control process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052 IWS1120A, Step 052 See IWS1128A Y).

  On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-61 (B). When this is done, the change display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (see N of Step 052IWS1128A, Step 052IWS1129A).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the ordinary accessory control process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052 IWS1120A, Step 052 N of IWS1127A).

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is changed to a large change (10R certain change in this example). In the case of a jackpot change that is a big hit, a 6R variable jackpot, or a 2R variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See IWS1128B Y).

  On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 9-61 (E). When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (see N of step 052IWS1128B, step 052IWS1129B).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-61 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 IWS1127B N).

  As described above, according to the present characteristic portion 072IW, the advantageous state control means capable of controlling the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) and a special state (a state different from the advantageous state). For example, a special state control means that can be controlled to a small hitting game state), a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by a special state compared to a non-special state, Determining means for determining whether to control to an advantageous state or to control to a special state; determining means to determine before determining the determining means; and a special state based on a determination (for example, a result of pre-reading determination) by the determining means. (For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (e.g., a small-hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect) that is different from the first suggestion effect and suggests the end of the special state. , And a viable demonstration execution means and Koatari RUSH ends suggested effect), execution ratio of the first suggestion effect and the second suggested effect is configured differently from each other. In this example, the rate of occurrence of the 10R probability variable jackpot (35% in the example shown in FIG. 9-5 (B)) and the rate of occurrence of the 2R normal jackpot (30% in the example) are different from each other. The rate at which it is determined that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is to be executed (100% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (A)) and the rate at which the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is to be executed at the time of 2R normal big hit ( 90% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), and the ratio determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect at the time of the small hit (in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), 35%) and the ratio (30% in the example) for determining that the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is to be executed is realized. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. The special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily executed, and the special state is a state in which the special state is easily controlled based on the variable display of the second identification information. The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed on condition that the variable display of the first identification information is not executed. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues is different from the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues (for example, small hit RUSH continuation). When the suggestion effect is executed, a 10R probability change big hit or a small hit is obtained, and in each case, the small hit RUSH is continued. When the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the 2R normal big hit or the small hit becomes, In the case of the 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH is not continued (see FIGS. 9-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the rate of ending the special state is lower than when the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed). When a small hit RUSH does not end in any case, a small hit RUSH does not end, but when a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, a 2R normal big hit or a small hit becomes a 2R normal big hit. The small hit RUSH ends (see FIGS. 9-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, the number of the production modes of the first suggestion effect and the number of the production modes of the second suggestion effect are different from each other (for example, as the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in which the production mode differs), A continuation suggestion effect, a second continuation suggestion effect, and a third continuation suggestion effect are provided, and a first end suggestion effect and a second end suggestion effect are provided as small hit RUSH end suggestion effects having different effect modes. -47). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the effect execution means can execute an effect that suggests that the special state will continue over a plurality of variable displays as the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Is the part that executes step 072 IWS115). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the effect execution means provides, as the first suggestion effect, an effect indicating over a plurality of variable displays that it is controlled to be in a specific type of advantageous state (for example, a 10R probability variation big hit). The second suggestion effect can be executed as an effect indicating a plurality of variable displays indicating that a special advantageous state (for example, 2R normal big hit) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, a specific type of advantageous state is controlled at a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect modes performs the first suggestion effect (for example, 3R suggestion effect> second continuation suggestion effect> 1st continuation suggestion effect has a high rate of 10R probability big hits (see FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C)), and any of a plurality of effect modes. Depending on whether or not the second suggestion effect is executed according to the effect mode, a special type of advantageous state is controlled by a different ratio (for example, a ratio of 2R normal jackpot in the order of second end suggestion effect> first end suggestion effect) (See FIGS. 9-47 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect in a common mode between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. For example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the variable display of the pre-reading advance notice target is executed or a timing at which the push button 31B is operated) is displayed after the hold display as the target of the small hit RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect is displayed in a common mode Etc.), there may be a case where the display mode changes to a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, and a case where the display mode changes to a display mode corresponding to the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature part 072IW, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and suggestions regarding the setting Setting suggestion effect performing means (for example, a setting value suggestion effect) for performing the setting suggestion effect. With such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Note that the ease of execution of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may differ depending on the length of the period in which the special effect is controlled. For example, in the first period from when the small hit RUSH state is started until the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (or until the number of small hits reaches a predetermined number, or until the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number). The execution ratio of the first suggestion effect is higher and the execution ratio of the second suggestion effect is lower than that of the second period after the first period (or the execution ratio of the first suggestion effect is lower and the second suggestion effect is executed). The ratio may be higher). With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a value is easily given. Then, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion effects.

  Specifically, in the present example, the small-hit winning suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, during the small hit RUSH, the frequency of winning in the special winning opening is particularly high, so that the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize) can be noticed, and the interest of the setting suggestion effect is improved. be able to.

  In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize) is performed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening as the specific area, is shown. It is not limited. For example, it is also possible to execute a setting suggestion effect based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), a general winning opening 10, and a large winning opening as a specific area. Good. In addition, a configuration suggestion effect may be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the out mouth as a specific area. Further, for example, a configuration suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on a game ball passing through a gate such as the passage gate 41 as a specific area.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a value is easily given. In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of execution of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIGS. 9-43). As shown in the figure, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball display suggestion effect A can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize ball can be executed with a probability of 2%. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed. When the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a probability of 1%. When the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 is displayed. %, The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed. When the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a probability of 3%. When it reaches the number, it is possible to execute the prize ball display suggestion effect F with a probability of 2% A). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion effects.

  In this example, the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 (in other words, Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in a period until a certain game value is given) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the “length of the period controlled in the special state” is the length of the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (the small hit game state in this example). It may be the length of a period to be performed, or may be the length of a total of these periods.

  When the length of the period controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the “length of the period controlled in the special state”, the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is longer, the higher the percentage of the prize ball display suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than a big hit with a large number of rounds.

  Also, for example, the “length of the period controlled in the special state” may be the number of small hits occurring during the high probability / second KT state, or the number of times the variable display is executed during the high probability / second KT state. In response, a configuration may be such that a prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed. In this case, for example, as the number of small hits increases, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate, or as the variation display number increases, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate. . Further, for example, at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, a presentation suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls may be executed at a high rate. Various embodiments are conceivable.

  In general, in a gaming machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "xxx over" is displayed, "1000 OVER" or the like of the prize ball number emphasizing effect shown in this example is used. The display is made in a unit having a certain degree of limitation, for example, a display is made in units of 1000 prize balls like a display such as "2000 OVER". In contrast, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in the present example is an unusual timing that the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666. Therefore, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the prize ball number display suggesting effect, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state). In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state). In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state and a game ball is won in the special winning opening). Based on this, a small hit prize suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion effects in connection with the control to the special state.

  Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on a game ball winning a special winning opening. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration suggesting effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game when the small hit is changed or when the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing a small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In any way, any configuration may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the small hit control.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17) is played when the game is controlled to the advantageous state and the special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) where it is easy to enter and a non-easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) where entry is difficult or impossible. In addition, a setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, the Based on the occurrence of a game ball winning in a winning opening or a special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a display effect indicating a prize ball number). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion effects in connection with the control of the variable means.

  In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls) is performed based on the fact that a game ball has won a large winning opening or a special winning opening. , But is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when an open effect is executed when the special variable prize ball device 7 or the special variable prize ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, a setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the open effect. It may be configured as follows. Any method may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in some form in response to the control of the variable means in the easy-to-enter state.

  Also, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the time of starting or ending the big hit game, when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state)) ), A setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, the display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052 IWS624). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in connection with the switching of the control of the game state.

  Note that, in this example, the “when the control of the game state is switched” is set at the time of starting or ending the big hit game, when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggested effect is configured to be executable is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), an effect period when shifting to the big hit game, or from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the time effect period. Also, for example, a gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on occurrence of a predetermined number of small hits. In the effect period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), a setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and may be variously described as “when the control of the game state is switched”. Various embodiments are conceivable.

  Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect mode of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit or the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times of performing the variable display during the special state, Setting suggestion effects can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, prizes with different selection ratios). The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state or the number of times the variable display was executed during the high probability / second KT state. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggesting effects A to F at different selection ratios.) Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total of the game value, or the number of times of performing the variable display.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, the special state includes an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) which is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Can be controlled. In addition, when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state, and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state, setting suggestion effects can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, Only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening due to a small hit during the second KT state, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize and the indication suggestion display of the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the type of the special state.

  Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state. The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, even when a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the first KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect indicating the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball enters the special winning opening during the second KT state. Can be executed at different rates depending on whether the player wins the game or the game ball wins the special winning opening during the first KT state. You may comprise. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball wins to the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. .

  In the case of the above configuration, when a special winning opening or an irregular winning occurs in the first KT state (high base state), a special winning opening occurs in the second KT state. In comparison with the above, it may be configured to perform a small hit prize suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect at a high rate, or a small rate prize ball number suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect at a low rate. It may be configured to execute.

  In the feature part 072IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during a big hit game based on the 10R certain hit jackpot, the 6R positive hit jackpot, and the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on the 6R regular jackpot. Is updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability change hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT state) (however, The prize ball counter is not reset until the prize ball counter is reset.) In principle, the display of the prize ball count is not displayed, and the variable display is ended 50 times in the low probability / first KT state to return to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where control is performed so as to reset the value of the prize ball number counter upon shifting has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball number counter may be updated even during a big hit game based on the 2R probability changing big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

  In the present example, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is ended and the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT state) State), a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs during the high base state, and the state again shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). With the number of balls taken over, the value of the prize ball number counter can be updated and a prize ball number display can be displayed.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the award ball number display mode as shown in the present example. For example, when the 10R probability change big hit and the transition to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is performed, the high probability / second KT state is used. (Small hit RUSH) and the immediately preceding big hit game may be regarded as one section, and the number of prize balls in the section may be totalized and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, a setting suggestion effect indicating the current setting value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the total value.

  In the feature part 072IW, as a “setting suggestion effect”, a small-hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect are provided in such a manner that the current setting value indicates one of the setting values “1” to “6”. Has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, a configuration suggesting effect may be executed in a manner that suggests whether or not a setting change for changing the setting value has been performed when the game machine is powered on. Good. As described above, the “setting suggestion effect” may be any one that suggests setting in some form.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. When the display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and it is preferable that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed). (2) The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed. Further, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lost symbol). Will be forcibly stopped). Therefore, control in consideration of the advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

  Specifically, in the case where a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information despite the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, if the variable design corresponding to the remaining hold of the one piece of identification information is forcibly uniformly displayed and stopped (forced disconnection) uniformly, even if the variable display is a variable change that will result in a certain big change, it is determined to be a compulsory disconnection. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the feature part 072IW, the variable display which becomes a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is forcibly released, while the variable display which becomes a positive big hit is changed by extending the change (interrupting the measurement of the change time). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

  In this example, as an aspect of “do not stop the variable display of one identification information”, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is suspended (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been interrupted after the small hit game, is restarted. You may. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in such a form.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) in a special state is easily provided. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Further, based on the fact that the first specific display result has been derived and displayed, control is performed in a specific state (for example, control is performed after a big hit game based on a probable variable hit is completed), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the state is controlled to the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to the stable state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, V area 052IW104) while being controlled to an advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 9-11). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, a special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed ( 9-3 and 9-4). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the first display is derived and displayed based on the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-67 (B)). In the case where the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, Is not performed to derive and display the variable display with the predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Also, the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of the above, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information (FIGS. 9-68 and 9-68). 69). Further, when being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-68 and 9-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  In addition, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the game medium (for example, the game ball) entering the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). ) Can be executed, and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. Ball device 17). Further, after any one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variably displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state ( (For example, a small hitting game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when being controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that a game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move can be entered, and the variable means includes A game medium moving on a specific route (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-58 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and variably display the first identification information. Is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 9-58 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to provide appropriate notification about the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

  Specifically, as shown in the feature part 072IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be changed. Is configured such that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and the second special symbol is displayed when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case where the variation display of the symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol having a low winning ratio (advantage), substantially, Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will uselessly hit the game ball, and rather, will give an unfavorable firing promotion notification, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to the player's useless hit, and to realize appropriate notification.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the first holding storage means (for example, the first holding storage buffer) capable of storing the information relating to the variable display of the first identification information as the holding storage, and the variable display of the second identification information And second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on the hold as a hold storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, the state becomes an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, (Small hitting game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result at a high frequency. In addition, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the special display result being derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the hold storage can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, to pay out ten prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, a value higher than a predetermined value can be given (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening). In addition, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-58 (1) and (2)) and a visual recognition more than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute highly specific second specific notification (for example, right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 9-58 (1)). Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-58 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the state is controlled to the special state. In this case, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-58 (2)). Therefore, the notification corresponding to the value that can be given can be realized.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, it is more advantageous than when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). When the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 9-58 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative symbol) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, a variable display effect in a common mode can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, , The non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

  In addition, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, a delay unit (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable unit on the specific route. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a target from being hit at the timing when the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is performed in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the measures for capturing the game machine.

  The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a configuration is provided in which a passage member is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. May be.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, an effect is produced based on information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game and the game control means. Effect control means for controlling (for example, effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) for performing the predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load on the effect control unit.

  In the present example, the right strike notification is executed during the big hit game regardless of whether the first special symbol change display is executed or the second special symbol change display is executed. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area. If the big change is displayed on the symbol display, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. If the big special change is displayed on the big display, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a large hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case of a big hit, a right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left strike notification may be executed during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, in the event that a large hit has occurred in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hit notification is executed during the big hit game, thereby suppressing the player from erroneously performing the right hit operation. And the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where the right strike notification is executed even during the KT state has been described. The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to a gaming machine provided to the left of the gaming area, a right strike notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, and the time saving state. Is also good.

  Further, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during a small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first fluctuation display after the big hit game is completed, in addition to the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 and the right-hand notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. May be configured to execute the right strike notification.

  In this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, apart from the right-handed display 052IW007 of a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 9-58 (1), a symbol display indicating right-handedness (for example, a rightward triangle display) is displayed on the image display device 5. , The right-handed notification may be executed.

  Further, the small hit control method is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning prize ball devices are provided, and a special variable winning prize ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is different depending on the type of the small hit, and the small special winning symbol is displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol. The selection rate of the small hit type may be different between the case where the small hit type is selected and the case where the small hit is displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select a small hit type (or a small hit type in an open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls (or the small hit type in an open mode having a high winning rate) is easily selected. May be configured.

  Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the change display of the second special symbol, a right strike is notified during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-58 (2)), and the change display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs in the small hit game, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-58 (3)). However, when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in the case where a small hit occurs due to the change display of the second special symbol being performed in a situation where the left hitting operation is to be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hitting game. May be.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. It is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, control can be performed to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common between the case where control is performed in the non-specific state and the case where control is performed in the specific state (FIGS. 9-3 and 9). -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability or the classification distribution other than the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling property may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the special state includes a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Further, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 9-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

  Further, according to the feature part 072IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect indicating the setting value (for example, the setting value suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 9-57). Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the range is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or a setting value suggestion effect may be executed during a big hit game or a small hit game, and various modes may be considered.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the feature part 072IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value becomes excessive. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the case where the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be made different depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability change hit, 6R probability change hit, 6R normal change hit, 2R probability change hit, 2R normal change hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the big hit type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the big hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the case where the assignment of the big hit type is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown, It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 072IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic portion 072IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation pattern is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively changed depending on the set value. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control changes, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big hit lottery. Although the degree (difference in ball-out performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, the characteristic portion 072IW prevents such a problem from occurring by setting the common selection ratio of the variation pattern regardless of the set value. ing.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 10, the case where the assignment of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the variation pattern according to which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is varied depending on the set value. The configuration may be such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. It is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, control can be performed to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. Is determined as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. (For example, a determination value for determining a loss). In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). The predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs according to the set values (see FIGS. 9C and 9D). For this reason, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, according to the characteristic portion 072IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 9C and 9D). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). This can be performed in parallel with the variable display.) Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  In addition, according to the feature part 072IW, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Also, when a variable display in which a special display result (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed is executed while being controlled to the special state, a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 9-57). Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 072IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, control can be performed to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game characteristics.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952), the playability in the special state is monotonous, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved. In view of this, the present characteristic unit 072IW has the following object (means 1) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state and improving the interest in the game. The characteristic configuration of the gaming machine described in (1) to (10) is also disclosed.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an advantageous state control means capable of controlling a player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and an advantageous state. Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) that is different from a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is more likely to be given by a special state than a non-special state. Controllable special state control means, determination means capable of determining whether to control to an advantageous state or control to a special state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes steps 052IWS059A and 052IWS064A), and determination before determination by the determination means Possible determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes step 072 IWS045) and determination by the determination means (for example, Based on the first suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect) that suggests the continuation of the special state, and a second suggestion effect that is an effect mode different from the first suggestion effect and that indicates the end of the special state. An effect (for example, a small hit RUSH end suggestion effect), and an execution ratio of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are different from each other (for example, a ratio at which a 10R probability change big hit occurs ( In the example shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the rate of occurrence of the 2R normal big hit is different from the rate of occurrence of the 2R normal big hit (30% in the same example). (100% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (A)) and the ratio determined to execute the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect at the time of 2R normal big hit (90% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (B)). % When the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the ratio at which the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is determined to be executed at the time of the small hit (35% in the example shown in FIG. 9-47 (C)) is determined. It is characterized by being different from the determined ratio (30% in the same example).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 2) In the means 1, in the variable display execution, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. Means, wherein the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily executed, and the state is easily controlled to the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information. The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed on condition that the variable display of the 1 identification information is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 072IWS105 to 072IWS106 and steps 072IWS116 to 072IWS127). Part).
According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues is different from the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed and the special state continues (for example, small hit RUSH) When the continuation suggestion effect is executed, a 10R probability change big hit or a small hit is obtained. In each case, the small hit RUSH is continued. When the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the 2R normal big hit or the small hit is performed. In the case of the 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH is not continued (see FIG. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to 3, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the special state ends is lower than when the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, a small hit). When the RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, a 10R probability change big hit or a small hit is obtained. In either case, the small hit RUSH does not end. However, when the small hit RUSH end suggestion effect is executed, the 2R normal big hit or the small hit is obtained. In the case of the 2R normal big hit, the small hit RUSH ends (see FIGS. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the number of the production modes of the first suggestion effect and the number of the production modes of the second suggestion effect are different from each other (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation in which the effect modes are different). A first continuation suggestion effect, a second continuation suggestion effect, and a third continuation suggestion effect are provided as suggestion effects, and a first end suggestion effect and a second end suggestion effect are provided as small hit RUSH end suggestion effects having different production modes. (See FIGS. 9-47).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the effect execution means can execute, as a first suggestion effect, an effect that suggests that the special state continues over a plurality of variable displays ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute step 072 IWS 115).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the effect execution means may control the fact that a specific type of advantageous state (for example, a 10R probability large hit) is controlled as a first suggestion effect over a plurality of variable displays. A second suggestion effect can be executed, and as a second suggestion effect, an effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays to be controlled to a special type of advantageous state (for example, 2R normal big hit). You may.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the first suggestion effect is controlled to a specific type of advantageous state at a different ratio depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the first suggestion effect is performed. (For example, the rate of 10R certainty-variable jackpots is high in the order of third continuation suggestion effect> second continuation suggestion effect> first continuation suggestion effect. See FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C)). A special type of advantageous state is controlled by a different ratio depending on which of the effect modes the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, 2R normal in the order of the second suggestion effect> the first end suggestion effect). The rate of big hits is high. (See FIGS. 9-47 (B) and (C).)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the gaming property related to the special state, and to improve the interest in the gaming.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect in a common mode between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, a small hit). After the hold display, which is the target of the RUSH pre-reading suggestion effect, is displayed in a common mode, a small timing is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the variable display of the pre-read notice is executed or the timing at which the push button 31B is operated). There is a case where the display mode changes to a display mode corresponding to a winning RUSH continuation suggestion effect, and a case where the display mode changes to a display mode corresponding to a small hit RUSH ending suggestion effect).
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting suggestion effect executing unit capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect) for suggesting the setting may be provided.
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23… First count switch 24… Second count switch 30… Hitting operation handle 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 32… Movable body 41… Pass gate 100… Game control microcomputers 101, 121… ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state that is a state different from the advantageous state,
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state in which a game value is easily imparted by the special state as compared to a non-special state,
Determining means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state or to control to the special state,
Determining means that can be determined before the determining means,
Based on the determination by the determination means, a first suggestion effect that suggests the continuation of the special state, and a second suggestion effect that is an effect mode different from the first suggestion effect and that indicates the end of the special state. Comprising an executable effect execution means,
A gaming machine, wherein when the first suggestion effect is executed, a rate at which the special state ends is lower than when the second suggestion effect is executed.